Third Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
19DS-126-AC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
RAM 1500
RAM 1500
2019
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................161
5
SAFETY ........................................................................193
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................269
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................369
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................423
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................495
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................511
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................575
12
INDEX..........................................................................581
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............5
▫ Essential Information ......................5
▫ Symbols ...............................5
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ..............5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
4 INTRODUCTION
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Cov-
ered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are miss-
ing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical sup-
port. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Windshield 5 — Doors
3 — Headlights 6 — Exterior Mirrors
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights 2 — Tailgate Handle
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Upper Switch Panel
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Uconnect System
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls
4 — Speed Controls 10 — Power Inverter
5 — Ignition 11 — Lower Switch Panel
6 — Gear Selector 12 — 4WD Selector
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Handles 4 — Seats
2 — Door Locks/Window Switches 5 — Upper Storage Compartment
3 — Steering Wheel 6 — Lower Storage Compartment
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .......18
䡵 KEYS .................................20
▫ Key Fobs .............................20
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................28
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped....28
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped ....29
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................29
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .............30
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................30
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ...............30
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................31
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .31
▫ General Information .....................32
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................32
▫ Key Programming ......................33
▫ Replacement Keys .......................33
▫ General Information .....................33
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...............34
▫ To Arm The System ......................34
▫ To Disarm The System ....................35
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................35
▫ Security System Manual Override ............35
䡵 DOORS ...............................35
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................35
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...........37
3
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........37
▫ Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........40
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock ................41
䡵 SEATS ................................42
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment ..............43
▫ Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ...............44
▫ Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped . . .45
▫ Power Passenger Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped ...........................47
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........48
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............51
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .............53
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) ....................54
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................55
▫ Front Head Restraint Adjustment ............55
▫ Rear Head Restraint Adjustment .............56
▫ Front Head Restraint Removal ..............56
▫ Rear Head Restraint Removal ...............57
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................57
▫ Tilt Steering Column .....................57
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........58
䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................59
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................61
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......61
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....61
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped .............62
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................63
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped............................63
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..............64
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped .................65
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ........67
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............67
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....68
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped ......68
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................69
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................69
▫ Headlight Switch .......................69
▫ Headlights ............................70
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .70
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................71
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped .............................71
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................72
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........72
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights ............73
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ................73
▫ Headlight Delay ........................73
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................73
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................74
▫ Turn Signals ...........................74
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........74
▫ Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped ....75
▫ Battery Saver ..........................76
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................76
▫ Courtesy Lights .........................76
▫ Illuminated Approach ....................79
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........79
▫ Windshield Wipers ......................79
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........81
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................82
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen . .82
▫ Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen . . .86
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen .90
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........97
▫ Operating Tips .........................98
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
䡵 WINDOWS ............................100
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped ............100
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................103
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........103
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................104
▫ Closing Sunroof .......................104
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................105
▫ Sunshade Operation ....................105
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................105
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ...............105
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................105
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................105
䡵 HOOD ...............................106
▫ To Open The Hood .....................106
▫ To Close The Hood......................106
䡵 TAILGATE .............................107
▫ Opening .............................107
▫ Closing ..............................107
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .107
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....108
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............109
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code...........111
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......111
▫ Using HomeLink .......................113
▫ Security..............................113
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................113
▫ General Information .....................114
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................
115
▫ Storage ..............................115
▫ Cupholders ..........................125
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................126
▫ Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped ..........................130
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............130
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ..........131
䡵 PICKUP BOX ...........................132
䡵 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED .................133
▫ RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins......133
▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox ............135
▫ RamBox Safety Warning ..................136
▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped...............137
▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System ................143
䡵 SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .....................145
▫ Camper Applications ....................145
䡵 EASY-OFF TAILGATE ....................145
▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless
Entry — If Equipped ....................146
▫ Removing The Tailgate ...................147
▫ Locking Tailgate........................148
䡵 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................148
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal............148
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ..........154
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ...........160
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If
Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle
is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Up-
dated in real-time
Available when and where
you need it
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface
Maintenance schedules
and information
Multilingual
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses either a wireless ignition node system or
keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a
key fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and an ignition
switch. The keyless ignition system consists of a key fob
and Keyless Enter-N-Go button.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop, cell phone charging cable source,
or other electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal.
The wireless ignition node key fob operates the ignition
switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition
switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the
desired position. It also contains the key fob and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
The keyless ignition key fob allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push
Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which
are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth posi-
tion is START, during start RUN will illuminate. It also
contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the key fob.
Key Fob Emergency Key Keyless Ignition Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by
referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/
STOP button and push to disarm the security system.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the door lock cylinder with either side up.
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated
key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. Push and release the lock button on
the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Key Fob Emergency Key
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to any
button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph
(8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding
to all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Set-
tings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will
unlock all doors.
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn
signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowl-
edge the signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm
system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With Remote
Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
Emergency Key Removal Remove Screw From Key Fob Case
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in
step #2 for removal.
Separating Key Fob Case Separating Key Fob Case
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
IGNITION SWITCH
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
from the START position, the switch automatically returns
to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Switch
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a
chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
when the driver door is open.
• “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN
when the driver door is open.
• The instrument cluster display will display “Key In
Ignition.”
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the
ON/RUN mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another
vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle
security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the
headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly.
For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle
security light will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF.⬙
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power
door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the
doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in
the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate that the system is armed.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle. If equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP but-
ton (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light
flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condi-
tion which initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if you
lock/unlock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or REVERSE, apply the
parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key
fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switches are on each front door trim
panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime
will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Power Door Lock Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by
pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons
(if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the
vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
•
After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an autho-
rized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have
the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Child Lock Control
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seat back is in
the upright position.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) — Standard
Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat back to
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind the
seat.
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing for-
ward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On
some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily
folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compart-
ment.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Manual Recline Lever
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support.
Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passen-
ger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Lumbar Control Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your
remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
Memory Seat Buttons
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the
feature has to be selected.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you
must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on
how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch, then push and
release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
• The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat and the power pedals (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the
key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position
is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a
position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7
inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
heated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driv-
er’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator
lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air
from the passenger compartment and move air through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.
Grocery Bag Hooks
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable
head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab)
has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in
the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropri-
ate height.
NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom
must be folded up.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary based on the temperature of the
surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls. There
are also buttons located within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
Tilt Steering Lever
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator
pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The
following messages will appear on vehicles equipped
with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out:
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged”
or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the
best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Re-
fer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjust-
able pedal’s path.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
display. For further information, refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automati-
cally adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch.
Power Mirror Controls Location
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electri-
cally fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
which can cause excessive drag.
Power Mirror Movement
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to its full forward position.
2.
Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to the full retract position (this may require multiple
button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while
the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds.
If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds
they may not fully open or close. You should slow down
to a moderate speed and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times
in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to
protect the motors from over heating.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
Folding Mirror
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head
to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide
loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror
head should be rotated (flipped in or out).
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and
can be adjusted separately.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this section for further
information.
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired posi-
tion.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens clean-
ing procedures must be followed.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
Headlight Switch Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
radio. For further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” and
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the headlight position. When the headlight
switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light
and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off
the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
lamp will illuminate.
Headlight Position
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multi-
function lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the
low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
High Beams” within your Uconnect settings, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for fur-
ther information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: The Automatic High Beams will not activate until
the vehicle is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be deactivated
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
Automatic Headlight Position
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be canceled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Fog Light Switch
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on
by pushing the cargo lights button located just below the
headlight switch.
If the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just inside the
pickup box. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display when this lights are on. Pushing the switch
a second time will turn the lights off.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for
approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right
detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
Bed Light Switch With RamBox
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individu-
ally as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding
lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor console area.
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control to the right (brighter) or to the left (dimmer).
“Party Mode”
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control all the way left, to the off detent, will
cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as
the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without discharging the
vehicle’s battery.
“Parade Mode”
When the headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and
overhead console by rotating the control to the right until
Ambient Light
Dimmer Control
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
you hear a click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further details.
Illuminated Approach
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the
way to the top detent).
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
vertical thumb wheel all the way to the bottom detent).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated ap-
proach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off by moving the instrument panel dimmer into the
“Dome Defeat” detent position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maxi-
mum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob upward
to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it
enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between
cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer
knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed
while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first
detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate
this feature.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O
(off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the
coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside air conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recircula-
tion may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the con-
trol clockwise from the off position.
Modes Control:
Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost out-
lets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Manual Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control With Touchscreen
Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Press the button on the touchscreen to select MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and will put
the A/C to its maximum power.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button on the touchscreen or faceplate to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C).
A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside
air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Setting
Push the button to activate Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window de-
mist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Press the arrows on the touchscreen or faceplate to regulate the temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. Pressing the down arrow indicates cooler temperatures, and pressing
the up arrow indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Press the buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through
the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clock-
wise from the off position.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Automatic Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside
of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature set-
tings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after ten minutes.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature set-
tings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the touch-
screen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Icon Description
NAV
for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
will move up and down with the driver’s temperature, when it is increased and decreased, re-
spectively.
NOTE: Temperature numbers will only be displayed if the system is equipped with Automatic
Temperature Control.
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger tem-
perature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons. For Uconnect 3, press the button to access the blower screen and
control the blower.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the Cli-
mate Control System off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is dis-
abled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to
use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passen-
ger temperature control buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Operating Tips Chart WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window controls located on the driver’s door
trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip
control of all power windows. There is a single opening
and closing switch on the front passenger door and the rear
doors for passenger window controls. The windows will
operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned OFF or until a front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push to the switch to the
first detent and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection (4-Door
Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only) —
If Equipped
Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the rear passenger
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passen-
ger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or
down position. To enable the window controls, push the
window lock switch again and return the switch to the
released or up position.
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console.
Window Lockout Switch
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock
to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Rear Window Switch
Power Sunroof Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
To Close The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Release
Safety Latch Location
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
TAILGATE
Opening
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and pull the
tailgate down.
Closing
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
latched.
NOTE: Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to
ensure it is securely latched.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
HomeLink Buttons
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
federal safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before
you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.”
Release the buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” ap-
pears on the display.
NOTE:
• For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the
engine ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all times.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the Instrument
Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will
show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
opener/device activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device acti-
vates, programming is complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push
and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter every
two seconds.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. Make
sure while programming HomeLink with the engine ON
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
instrument cluster display shows “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the instrument
cluster display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on
the handle release. The glove compartment door will
automatically open.
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
Upper Glove Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Lower Glove Compartment
Front Door Storage
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating
position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Rear Door Storage
Center Storage Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power
outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices,
refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further information.
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open
the lower storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Bin
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The center console is equipped with a front storage bin
located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be
equipped with a manual sliding top door.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning.
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
Opened Storage Bin
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
in serious or fatal injury.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Storage Bin
Unfolding The Load Floor
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor In Open Position
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under
The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
Load Floor In Open Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Quad Cab — If Equipped
Crew Cab — If Equipped
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional
storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid.
NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat
floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats, two cupholders
are located next to the center console storage bin.
Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section
of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
Crew Cab Storage
Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located
in the center armrest.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that
consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.
Electrical Power Outlets
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
Rear Armrest Cupholder
Rear Cup Wells
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
equipped with a bench seat.
Power Outlets — Center Stack
1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats. • Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad
Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Center Console
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin / USB
Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If Equipped
A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat, the cup holder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 or 230 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on
the center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
outlet automatically turns off when the device is un-
plugged.
NOTE:
• The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be
used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power
Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it
will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connec-
tions to the switches are found under the hood in the
connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution
Center.
Power Inverter Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of either
battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and
convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must
use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the
box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings
and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
Pick Up Box Features
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-
poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports
must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to
the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result.
The use of proper supports will permit loading up to
the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup
box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs
(450 kg) total.
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
per bin for 1500 series vehicles.
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and
release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will
open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully
open.
NOTE: RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time, it
is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
There is a manual on/off switch located at the rear of each
storage bin. Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin
lights, pushing the switch again will turn the lights back
on.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition
to other RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further details. The RamBox storage bins can
be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the
storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the push
button and turn clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to
unlock. Always return the key to the upright (vertical)
position before removing the key from the push button.
RamBox Light Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
CAUTION!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
RamBox Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
— If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
Storage Position
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends
to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place.
Cargo Tie Down Loop Side Gates Closed
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider position, perform
the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
Aligning Gate To Slots
Side Gates Closed
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
To install the bed extender into the extender position,
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
Extender Position
Extender Installation
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
Locking Tab
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: This feature is available for vehicles both equipped,
or not equipped, with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that
can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out
on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired
location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleats
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30
Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat
off the end of the rail.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document at www.ramtrucks.com. For safety reasons,
follow all instructions in this important document.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over-
hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry, the electrical connector must be
disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Utility Rail End Cap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote
Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing
inward in the locking tab.
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and
insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove com-
partment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that
the terminals do not corrode.
Connector Bracket
Locking Tab
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and
or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting
The Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
Locking Tang
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the over-
hanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate
can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck
with the key fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau
Cover which consists of different features:
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
• Tonneau fore aft locator
• Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking capability
NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured
at the front of the box without removing it completely.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover, follow the next steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the underside of the
cover (left and right side).
Clamped Position
NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the Tonneau
Cover’s rear panel.
3. From the released position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper
up. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the clamp
has been properly stowed.
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp wire
are in the proper stowed position. If the clamp and
clamp wire are not properly stowed, damage to the
Tonneau Cover material will result.
Released Position
Stowed Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel (interme-
diate position).
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the front panel
(Tri-Folded position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
Tri-Folded Position
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When folding the center and rear panels, the sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover
material.
• It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the
Tonneau Cover in the Tri-Folded position.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
6. Once on the Tri-Folded position, pull both front clamp
handles down to the Released Position.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
Released Position
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper
up. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the clamp
has been properly stowed.
8. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the Tonneau Cover
panels from unfolding.
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded com-
pletely before removing.
Stowed Position
Stowage Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the cover forward against the front of the truck
bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on
the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the
clamps from the stowed position.
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of the box (or
flange of the Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi
clamped position.
Stowed Position
Semi Clamped Position
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not improp-
erly attached to the truck bed flange.
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the intermediate
position.
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE: When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage to the
cover material.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven) Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover. 8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the released
position.
Fully Unfolded Position
Stowed Position
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
Semi Clamped Position
Clamped Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar
Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather & Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
Improper Clamp Position
Locking Hole
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..............162
▫ Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions .........162
䡵 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........164
▫ Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....164
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........166
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls .........166
▫ Oil Life Reset..........................168
▫ Display Menu Items .....................169
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped ..........................177
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........179
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................179
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................183
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................187
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................188
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................188
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................189
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .189
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................190
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................191
4
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Base Instrument Clusters
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
• When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay
within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
Premium Instrument Clusters
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater
system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling
operation is controlled by the engine control module. Post-
heat operation can run for several minutes, and then the
electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
• The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
4. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Trailer Tow
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not equipped with a Uconnect touch-
screen radio)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu items, sub-
menu screen, and vehicle settings.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access/
select the information screens, submenu screens
of a main menu item, or to return to the main
menu.
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,”
then push and release the right arrow button to reset the
Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
“Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “YES” by
pushing the right arrow then push and release the right
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Display Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the
directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure
• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped
• Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to
reset Average Fuel Economy.
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge
• Average Fuel Economy Value
• Range To Empty
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter
the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B
information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button
and the next screen will display the following trailer trip
information:
• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right
arrow button to reset the distance.
• Trailer Brake
• Output
• Type
• Gain
• Trailer Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
the active source.
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (Default Setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (Default Setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Gauge
• None
• Trans Temp
• Oil Temp
• Oil Life
• Current MPG
• Trailer Brake
Odometer
• No Decimals (Default Setting)
• Decimals
Restore Defaults
• Cancel (Default Setting)
• Ok
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the up and down button until Settings
displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following
Vehicle Settings.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle
Settings will be included in the instrument cluster dis-
play.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Set-
tings will be included in the radio head unit.
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left
Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch,
Portuguese, Arabic (If Equipped)
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
• Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Re-
verse
Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wip-
ers
Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off De-
lay
Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left
Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
8 Illuminated Ap-
proach
Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with
Wipers
Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic High-
beams
Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with
Lock
Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
14 Sound Horn with
Remote Start
Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
15 Sound Horn with
Remote Lock
Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
16 Remote Unlock Se-
quence
Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to
Memory
Key in Memory On; Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left
Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
19 Remote Start Com-
fort System
Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power De-
lay
Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Set-
tings
Commercial
• Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
NOTE: If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not
known, see an authorized dealer to have the PIN
reset.
23 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
24 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy
EOH
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left
Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
25 Trailer Name Trailer Name
• Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
• Boat
• Car
• Cargo
• Dump
• Equipment
• Flatbed
• Gooseneck
• Horse
• Livestock
• Motorcycle
• Snowmobile
• Travel
• Utility
• 5th Wheel
26 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
27 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
28 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left
Submenu Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
29 Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
Park Assist Front Chime Volume On; Off
30 Park Assist Rear
Chime Volume
Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off
Turn Menu Off — If Equipped
Push and release the right arrow button to exit the main
menu.
Push and release any instrument cluster display control
button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu
again.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping, etc.).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips, and if the
evaluation and driving pattern of the vehicle did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake
has been disconnected.
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoid-
ing sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit
and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant
level is low.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap
is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light.
If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature
is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK
and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cargo light is
activated by pushing the cargo light button on the head-
light switch.
— 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
wheel drive operation and proper use.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
— TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/HAUL
mode is selected.
Green Indicator Lights
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— 4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front axle is engaged,
but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-
wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the
vehicle senses a loss of traction.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and
proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................194
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............194
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............195
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............206
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......206
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........212
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........212
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............212
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................213
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........226
▫ Child Restraints .......................238
▫ Transporting Pets ......................264
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................265
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................265
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................265
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...........................266
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................268
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
194 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
5
SAFETY 195
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
196 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
5
SAFETY 197
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
198 SAFETY
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
5
SAFETY 199
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
200 SAFETY
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
5
SAFETY 201
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma-
neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in-
tended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
202 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
5
SAFETY 203
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
204 SAFETY
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
5
SAFETY 205
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
206 SAFETY
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 207
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
208 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different
color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will return to it’s original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPMS Warning Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
5
SAFETY 209
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPMS Warning Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPM sensor
location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an
incorrect TPM sensor location, the “TPMS Warning Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Tem-
porarily Unavailable” message in place of the tire pressure
display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this se-
quence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the “TPMS Warning
Light” will no longer flash and the tire pressure display
screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure values
for the correct locations.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
210 SAFETY
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
TIRE” message will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a pressure value in a different color and an
“Inflate to XX” message.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
5
SAFETY 211
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
212 SAFETY
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
5
SAFETY 213
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
214 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab and Crew Cab
front center seating position have combination lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
5
SAFETY 215
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
216 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5
SAFETY 217
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Positioning The Lap Belt
218 SAFETY
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Anchorage
5
SAFETY 219
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
(Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows
the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
220 SAFETY
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
(Continued)
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
5
SAFETY 221
WARNING! (Continued)
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions —
If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab and Crew
Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt,
slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfort-
able.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
222 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 223
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
224 SAFETY
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 225
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
226 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
5
SAFETY 227
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
228 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
5
SAFETY 229
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
230 SAFETY
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
5
SAFETY 231
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
232 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
5
SAFETY 233
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
234 SAFETY
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
5
SAFETY 235
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
236 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
5
SAFETY 237
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
238 SAFETY
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of
the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the ve-
hicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
5
SAFETY 239
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
240 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
5
SAFETY 241
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
242 SAFETY
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
5
SAFETY 243
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Label
244 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
5
SAFETY 245
Quad Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
246 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench
rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position
5
SAFETY 247
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints can be removed
in every seating position if they inter-
fere with the installation of the child
restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
248 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchor-
ages behind the front center and right seats.
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models have tether
strap anchorages located behind each of the rear
seats.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
5
SAFETY 249
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Crew Or Quad Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage Crew Or Quad Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
250 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH Anchor-
ages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
5
SAFETY 251
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
252 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
5
SAFETY 253
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) /
Cinching Latchplate Locations
Cinching Latchplate = Cinching Latchplate
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
254 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraints can be removed
in every seating position if they inter-
fere with the installation of the child
restraint. Refer to “Head Restraints”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may
be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
5
SAFETY 255
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. For Crew And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep
the child as far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
256 SAFETY
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5
SAFETY 257
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
258 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are
located behind the center and right passenger seats. There
is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether
strap of the child restraint:
1.
Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head
restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
5
SAFETY 259
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts under-
neath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the
head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether
strap underneath the head restraint and between its
posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the
square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Quad or Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
loops located between the rear glass and the back of the
rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each
seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether
strap of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
260 SAFETY
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
5
SAFETY 261
NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
child seats should be connected to the center tether strap
loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
262 SAFETY
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route
the tether straps following the directions for right and
left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do
not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
5
SAFETY 263
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
264 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
5
SAFETY 265
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
266 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 267
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
268 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE —
GASOLINE ENGINE .....................272
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................272
▫ Tip Start Feature .......................273
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............273
▫ Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button ..............................273
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................277
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................278
▫ After Starting..........................278
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .278
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .278
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................279
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............281
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................282
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .283
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped ..........................283
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped ..........................291
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................300
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped ........301
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped ........306
▫ Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
If Equipped ..........................311
6
▫ Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) —
If Equipped ..........................317
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ..............321
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED.........................322
䡵 POWER STEERING.......................322
▫ Electric Power Steering ..................322
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .......................323
▫ To Activate ...........................324
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................324
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................324
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................325
▫ To Resume Speed ......................326
▫ To Deactivate .........................326
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................326
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................326
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................326
▫ ParkSense Display ......................327
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........330
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ..............................330
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............331
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........331
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST . .333
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................333
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................334
▫ ParkSense Display ......................334
▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense ............................336
▫ Service The
ParkSense Park Assist System .....336
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............337
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........337
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........339
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE . . .341
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............343
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................343
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........343
▫ Payload..............................343
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........343
▫ Tire Size .............................343
▫ Rim Size .............................343
▫ Inflation Pressure .......................343
▫ Curb Weight ..........................344
▫ Loading .............................344
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................344
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............345
▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ..............................349
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................349
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............350
▫ Towing Requirements ...................351
▫ Towing Tips ..........................358
䡵 SNOWPLOW ...........................359
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................360
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .360
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models ..............................361
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ..............................362
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................366
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............366
▫ Driving Thr
ough Water ..................366
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...................367
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals
will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
NOTE:
• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift
out of PARK.
• If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park
Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in “In
Case Of Emergency”.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run and will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and
the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed
Transmission Only
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the Instrument
Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au-
toPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the “ Au-
toPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to not be
seen. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve-
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when all of
these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
Driver’s Door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the Instrument Cluster
Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the trans-
mission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Parking Brake Release
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode)
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature
is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running, for vehicles with
eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The trans-
mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can
be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to
“Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section
for further information. Some models will display both the
selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in
ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to
⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
tion (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ignition switch
until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Eight-Speed Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine over-
speed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch
(on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available
gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
1 — GEAR - Switch 2 — GEAR + Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the
gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK
(column shift only).
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) or
moving the gear selector to the left or right (-/+) (console
shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit
in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to ⬙Electronic
Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for further
information. Some models will display both the selected
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode),
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
gear selector toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way forward
and to the left until it stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct
third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a sig-
nificant additional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
shifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During ex-
tremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), opera-
tion may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission tem-
perature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Six-Speed Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the trans-
mission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmis-
sion gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an addi-
tional underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can im-
prove vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1
though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive.
ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal
fourth and fifth gears.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
ing between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the left (-)
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in
third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear selector/switch
one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS
4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the
transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear).
Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top
available gear.
Column Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right
(+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch
(column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine over-
speed.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position,
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
• The engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate
temperature,
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
Console Gear Selector
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneu-
vers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
TOW/HAUL Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine brak-
ing can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
ing in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently
warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to
shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-
sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manu-
ally shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted trans-
fer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on
the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages
both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmis-
sion is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you mo-
mentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch
must be in the ON position with the engine either running
or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch
is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch
to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift,
then the desired position indicator light will flash con-
tinuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con-
ditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com-
plete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads).
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to
shift the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after selecting the desired position on the control
switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition must be in the
ON position with the engine either running or off. This
shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the
ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
• When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimen-
tal to the vehicle or occupants.
• When shifting into 4WD LOW press and hold the button
until the indicator light starts blinking.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four–wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road con-
ditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Push the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to
shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD
AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-
tarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the de-
sired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to com-
plete the shift.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs simi-
larly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will
supply maximum traction. When starting with only one
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight mo-
mentary application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control
of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering
The electric power steering system will give you effective
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and proper feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the in-
strument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or returning the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Slow Tone Fast Tone
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200
cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 inches (45 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Continuous Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable.
• The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes
has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
The instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is
disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in RE-
VERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear, see your authorized dealer.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will show ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18
inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driv-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message to appear in the instrument cluster
display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear,
and/or front fascia/bumper, and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking
maneuver.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this
section for limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display when the vehicle is in REVERSE,
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE: This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows
one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 79
inches (200 cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than 18
inches
(45 cm)
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47
inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12
inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None Single 1/2
Second Tone (for
rear only)
Slow (for rear
only)
Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-
mable.
• The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or
⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, fol-
lowed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the correspond-
ing side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will
interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument
cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the
corresponding arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN-
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function-
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see your
authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a
soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instru-
ment cluster display will read “FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position
and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙
or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds,
followed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the corre-
sponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be appear in the instrument
cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see a
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE or whenever it is
initiated through the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Con-
trols⬙ menu. Whenever the gear selector is put into RE-
VERSE, the image will be displayed in the rearview mirror
display (if equipped) or Uconnect screen (if equipped). If
the image is displayed in the Uconnect screen, a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” will display across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disap-
pear.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate
handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to,
8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated.
The image will continue to be displayed until the display
timer exceeds 10 seconds.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button
⬙X⬙.
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: For further information about how to access and
change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Rear View Camera Image On:
1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button
to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button, the
Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing
the ⬙X⬙ button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the
previous selected screen will appear.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Cap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce
risk of serious injury or death when filling containers:
• Always place container on the ground before filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
when you are filling it.
• Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will dis-
play in the instrument cluster telltale display
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR require-
ments.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Measuring Height (H)
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
dations have been met.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer
hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max.
Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper
Hitch
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) /
500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV 11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) /
1100 lbs (498 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Weight Distribution
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH)
trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compat-
ible with ITBM.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indi-
cator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the instru-
ment cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydrau-
lic Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydrau-
lic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change de-
pending on the customer preferences for braking perfor-
mance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road
state may also affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic modules
of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermar-
ket module is to be installed.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode
or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control).
NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Only
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle
in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
continuous operation, then change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Plan”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level be-
fore towing (Six-speed automatic only).
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
SNOWPLOW
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT
ALLOWED
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT
ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
devices to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets.
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is al-
lowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-
mission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to inter-
nal parts.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the
proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be
in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully
in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under
“Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission
damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The transmission must be placed in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking
brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL, push and hold
the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer
case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will blink while the shift is in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEU-
TRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and
the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL
(N) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps six and seven with automatic transmission
in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmis-
sions the shifter will automatically select PARK when
the engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the
ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode.
Remove the key fob from the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will
shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button
selector switch, push and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position
indicator light turns on.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),
turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful
to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmis-
sion, the engine must remain running, since turning the
engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the
transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to
shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-
matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal,
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and
must continue to be met until the shift has been com-
pleted. If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift,
the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the button is
released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Off-Road Driving Tips
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills
or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............371
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .371
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................376
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................376
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................377
䡵 FUSES ................................382
▫ Power Distribution Center ................382
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........394
▫ Jack Location ..........................394
▫ Removal Of Jack And Tools................394
▫ Removing The Spare Tire .................397
▫ Preparations For Jacking ..................400
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................401
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare ................406
▫ Reinstalling The Jack And Tools.............408
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................410
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............411
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................412
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............413
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION ........................414
▫ Column Gear Selector — If Equipped.........414
▫ Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped . . .415
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION ........................416
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............417
7
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............419
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .................420
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .................421
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped........421
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................422
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............422
370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper
switch bank just below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
Assist And SOS Mirror
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guard-
ian features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3.
Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator
is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guard-
ian features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
•
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may
be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s
SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak
with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do
so may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp –
Low Beam
H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp –
High Beam
9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base Quad Headlamp)
3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Pro-
jector Headlamp - Low
Beam
9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Pro-
jector Headlamp - High
Beam
9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Premium Headlamp)
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal
shape)
9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
Bulb Number
LED Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and
Stop Lamp
3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn
and Stop Lamp
LED (Serviced at autho-
rized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the
upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender
ledges.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen-
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
Slide Lock
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the
lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb
has been replaced.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from
the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough
to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of
the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retain-
ers in the outer box side panel.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb
socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the
body as shown.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring
harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
CHMSL Connector Location
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F04 50 Amp Red 400W Inverter – If Equipped (HD Only)
F05 40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red (Special
Services Vehicle
(SSV))
– Compressor For Air Suspension – If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump Motor (DS 1500 Only)
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue (DS
1500 LD/Cummins
Diesel)
40 Amp Green
–
–
NOX Sensor – If Equipped
Aux Relay Output- SSV Only
F09 40 Amp Green (SSV
& Cummins Diesel)
– Aux Relay Output / Diesel Fuel Heater – If
Equipped
F09 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped (HD
Only)
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F11 30 Amp Pink – PWR - Trailer Tow Electric Brake Batt Feed –
If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (ECU and Valves) (HD
Only)
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting
F15 30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
–
–
Power Side Steps – If Equipped (HD Only)
Extra Fuse - SSV Only
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch Control Module – If Equipped (HD
Only)
F19 20 Amp Blue (DS
1500 LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink (Cum-
mins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module GPEC / Heavy Duty
/ Other – If Equipped
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F22 25 Amp White
(Cummins Diesel)
– PCM – If Equipped
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed # 1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module /
Valves – If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Sepa-
rate E-Brake)/Trailer Tow (BUX)
F31 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Heater Control – If Equipped (DS
1500 LD Diesel)
F31 20 Amp Blue – Aux App SSV Only - If Equipped
F32 – – Aux Feed, Special Services Vehicle-If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Module – If Equipped (HD
Only)
Aux Feed, SSV Only (DS 1500 Only)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If
Equipped (HD Only)
SSV (DS 1500 Only)
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Electric Back Light – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater #2, Aux Relay2–IfEquipped
(HD Only)
SSV (DS 1500 Only)
F38 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If
Equipped (HD Only)
Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – SSV Only
F40 – 10 Amp Red Ventilated Seats – If Equipped (HD Only)
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam – If
Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped (HD
Only)
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coil – If Equipped (HD
Only)
Spare (DS 1500 Only)
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster / HVAC (DS 1500
Only)
Instrument Cluster / MOD CSG (HD Only)
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If
Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
Node Module, Radio Frequency Hub Mod-
ule / Electric Steering Column Lock - If
Equipped
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non Memory Adjustable Pedals - If
Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content - If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM/PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW
(RFE Trans Only) – If Equipped (HD Only)
Transmission (DS 1500 Only)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting (LED) – If Equipped (HD Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp / TCM – If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
F61 – 10 Amp Red UREA Sensor / PM Sensor – If Equipped
(DS 1500 LD Diesel & Cummins Diesel)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Ignition Coils Capacitors
(Gas) / Short Runner Valve Actuator / Urea
Heater Control Unit (DS 1500 LD Diesel) /
RLY Coil Feed-SCR (DS 1500 LD Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module
/ SRV – If Equipped
F65 – 10 Amp Red MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port /
USB IP / WCPM – If Equipped (HD Only)
Spare (DS 1500 Only)
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Light and Rain Sensor Module /
Inside Rearview Mirror / Passenger Window
SW / USB Port Rear / Feed for R/A RLY #2
Coil – If Equipped
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / UCI Port – If Equipped (HD
Only)
Bluetooth Hands-Free Module / CD – If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR – If Equipped (HD Only)
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed
(Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Cancelation – If
Equipped (HD Only)
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM / DC/DC Converter Voltage– If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (Rear Tank) – If
Equipped (HD Only)
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm – If Equipped (HD Only)
F75 – 10 Amp Red ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY– If
Equipped (HD Only)
Coolant Temperature Valve – If Equipped
(DS 1500 Only)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (HD Only)
Brake System Module / Stop Lamp Switch /
Electric Park Brake / Clutch Pedal Switch
(DS 1500 Only)
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle Dis-
connect Module / TCM (HD Only)
Drivetrain Control Module / ELSD / Front
Axle Disconnect Module / Transmission
Control Relay / RDM / Power Take Off Unit
– If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control
Module / Electric Power Steering (DS 1500
Only)
F78 – 15 Amp Blue Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control
Module / AEB RACM MOD / Feed To AUX
PDC Relay Coils (HD Only)
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module (DS 1500 Only)
ASSY Overhead Console / SW Assist / SW
911 – If Equipped (HD Only)
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If
Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise
Control
F83 – – No Connection
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat
Switches
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column
Control Module / MOD Gateway CAN-C
Trailer TPM (HD Only)
Air Suspension / Trailer Tow / DC/DC
Converter (Voltage Stabilizer) / Steering Col-
umn Control Module / Occupant Classifica-
tion Sensor (DS 1500 Only)
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN or BATT Customer Selectable – If
Equipped (HD Only)
Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Select-
able (DS 1500 Only)
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch (DS
1500 Only)
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Mod-
ule TPM Trailer (HD Only) / Module Gate-
way Can-C Trailer TPM (HD Only)
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL
Camera / Blind Spot Sensor / Surround
View Camera (HD Only)
Rear Camera / Park Assist / Blind Spot Sen-
sor / Compass (DS 1500 Only)
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch / Trunk Lamp With
Flashlamp Charger / Truck Lamp - If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
Trailer Camera – If Equipped (HD Only)
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats And Heated Steering
Wheel – If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Passenger – If Equipped
(HD Only)
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped (DS 1500
Only)
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Driver – If Equipped (HD
Only)
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / DASM (DS 1500 Only)
HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG
MOD / Humidity Sensor (HD Only)
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped (HD Only)
F101 – 15 Amp Blue SSV Only
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Right (HD Only)
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil
(HD Only)
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS (HD Only)
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center
Console) / Trunk – If Equipped (DS 1500
Only)
UCI Port / USB Rear (HD Only)
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passen-
ger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools
from bag.
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Jack And Tools
Jack And Tool Bag
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
CAUTION!
• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism ad-
justing nut.
• Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assembled For Jack Operation
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Extension With Jack Hook
3 — Extension 3
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
NOTE: Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the
vehicle.
Jack / Extensions Placement
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator
4X2 Front Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with jack hook and the
lug wrench. The extension tubes may be used but is not
required.
4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator
4X4 Front Jacking Location
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the extension with
jack hook to the jack and connect the extension tubes. Place
the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock
bracket with the extension with jack hook extending to the
rear.
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the
spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the lug nuts toward the wheel. Hand tighten the lug
nuts with vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Lower vehicle to ground, finish tightening the lug nuts.
Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the
correct lug nut torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
an authorized dealer or service station.
Rear Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot
be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will
not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in
the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-
nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tubes through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In
Position
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel
is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtight-
ened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is
firmly in place.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench
is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle Jack And Tool Bag
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack And Tools Tied
Jack Hold Down Fastener
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Jack And Tools
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only
jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+)
symbol on or around the post.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Jumping Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical cur-
rent will blow the fuse.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor.
Column Gear Selector — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and
push and hold the override release lever up.
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Center Console Gear Selector — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Re-
lease. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above
the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of
the lever) to the right.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged posi-
tion, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward,
until it locks in place pointing towards the driver’s seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park
Release lever is locked in the released position.
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
is locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic trans-
mission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed
transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed
transmission)
See instructions in “Recreational Tow-
ing” under “Starting And Operating”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” or “Gear
Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shift-
ing the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the 8–speed transmission to NEUTRAL when
the engine is OFF.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km)
for 8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information and detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................425
▫ Maintenance Plan ......................426
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ............429
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................430
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................430
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................431
▫ Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine ...........432
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................432
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................433
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................433
▫ Engine Oil — Gas Engine .................434
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................436
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................436
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............438
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............444
▫ Body Lubrication ......................445
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................446
▫ Exhaust System ........................449
▫ Cooling System ........................450
▫ Brake System .........................456
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................457
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ...............................461
▫ Transfer Case .........................461
䡵 HOISTING ............................462
䡵 TIRES ................................462
▫ Tire Safety Information .................
.462
▫ Tires — General Information ..............472
8
▫ Tire Types ............................478
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................479
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............482
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............483
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............484
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................485
▫ Treadwear ............................486
▫ Traction Grades ........................486
▫ Temperature Grades .....................486
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................487
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................487
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........487
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........488
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................488
䡵 INTERIORS ............................491
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................491
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................492
▫ Leather Parts ..........................493
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................493
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty
NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350
hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a
dusty and off road environment or is operated predomi-
nantly at idle, or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and automatic transmission (six-speed
only) and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for
required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle sur-
faces. If gear oil leakage is sus-
pected, check the fluid level. If us-
ing your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing, change axle fluid.
XX X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-
matic only), if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-
matic only).
X
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
XX
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the con-
tainer, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to
avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil — Gas Engine
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L/5.7L
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 is recommended for all operating tem-
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature start-
ing and vehicle fuel economy.
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
(Continued)
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door
and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, push inward on both
sides of the glove compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges
by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop
and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs
on each end of the filter cover.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
Filter Cover
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
Finger Tabs Finger Tab
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the
glove compartment sides.
Cabin Air Filter
Glove Compartment Installation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the
wiper arm.
Windshield Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Locking Assembly
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2—Wiper
3 — Release Tab
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
(Continued)
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on
the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
neck.
Opening The Coolant Reservoir
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated
marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”. It
is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical
flushes should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot
be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the instrument
cluster screen (refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for
further information).
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instru-
ment cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required
to reach the normal operating temperature. If the trans-
mission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle
cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to
bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY
the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids And Lubricants⬙ for fluid
specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through
the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for
the oil to fully drain into the transmission before re-
checking the fluid level.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with
the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region
of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid
level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check
the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmis-
sion reaches normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the park-
ing brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal
for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully
seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed Transmission
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information. This inspection should be made
with the vehicle in a level position.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill
hole (within 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) for the
FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tion” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
If equipped, Limited Slip Differentials are require that 5 oz.
(148 ml) of Mopar Limited Slip Additive be added to the
gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specification” for further information. The Mopar
Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear lubri-
cant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle equipped
with a Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Lim-
ited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubri-
cant is added to insure proper additive fill.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations.
However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on
any other parts of the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with
another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure
sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neu-
tral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain
type, and axle recommendations:
Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class
Rear Only P265/70R17 S Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Directional Tires — If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, the
rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid-
eration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation
pattern for directional tires is shown below.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the
metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the
chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road
debris and salt using an automotive soap. Bumpers should
be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and
water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can stain or damage the protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh brushes.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner,
or equivalent is recommended.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV expo-
sure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bed-
liner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse
all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner
Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become slip-
pery and may result in personal injury.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many dif-
ferent types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic
fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your
Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed.
If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by
your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the
metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or
gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar Quick
Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................497
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............497
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................497
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .497
▫ Torque Specifications ....................498
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................499
▫ 3.6L Engine ...........................499
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................499
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................500
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................500
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............500
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .501
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......501
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................501
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................501
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............502
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) ........503
▫ E-85 General Information .................503
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................503
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................503
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..............504
▫ Starting .............................504
▫ Cruising Range ........................505
▫ Replacement Parts ......................505
▫ Maintenance ..........................505
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................506
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Informa-
tion Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated
brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, you will experience a substantial in-
crease in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Vehicle Identification Number
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 497
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/
Bolt Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gaso-
line will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec-
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and Non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating greater than 87
(R+M)/2, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 503
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
504 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
affect drivability.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 505
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine – (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
506 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine – If Equipped 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 507
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
508 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for
Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front Axle We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require
the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 509
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................513
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...............513
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................514
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................515
▫ Uconnect 3 Customer Programmable Features . .516
▫ Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Customer Programmable
Features .............................533
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................549
▫ Radio Operation........................549
▫ Media Mode ..........................549
▫ CD Player — If Equipped .................550
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .550
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .551
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........551
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................552
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................552
▫ Get Started ...........................554
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................555
▫ Radio ...............................557
▫ Media ...............................559
▫ Phone ...............................561
▫ Voice Text Reply — If Equipped ............563
▫ Climate (4C/4C NAV) ...................564
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) ....................565
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) —
If Equipped ...........................566
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................567
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................567
10
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............568
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............569
▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...................570
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............570
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............571
▫ General Information .....................572
▫ Additional Information ...................572
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............573
512 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 513
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
514 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 515
Uconnect 3 Customer Programmable Features
Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off
Options, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until the
button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete either
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or the Back
button on the faceplate, to return to the previous menu.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touch-
screen on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
516 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Set Language English, Français, Español
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric
10
MULTIMEDIA 517
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select
“AM” or “PM.”
518 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the prox-
imity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume —
If Equipped
Low Med High
Tilt Side Mirrors In Re-
verse — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
10
MULTIMEDIA 519
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the igni-
tion is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
520 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0306090
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 521
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only
the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is acti-
vated.
522 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Memory Linked To Fob — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
•
The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
•
The seat will return to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 523
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driv-
er’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
524 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 525
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
526 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
10
MULTIMEDIA 527
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Variance 123456789101112131415
NOTE:
•
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
•
Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sen-
sor, and it may give false readings.
Perform Compass
Calibration
On Off
NOTE: Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and com-
pleting one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now
function normally.
528 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 529
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the
“Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
530 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Restore Default Settings
After pressing the “Restore Default Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Default Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Default Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to
their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings
to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
10
MULTIMEDIA 531
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is se-
lected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Can-
cel” to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see an authorized dealer for
further information.
532 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Customer Programmable
Features
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options,
Trailer Brake, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if
equipped), Reset Settings, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu or press the “X” button on the touch-
screen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side
of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the list of available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
10
MULTIMEDIA 533
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to
activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+–
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+–
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
534 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out
— If Equipped
On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn
In Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Fuel Saver Display in
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
10
MULTIMEDIA 535
Clock
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
On Off
Set Time Hours –+
Set Time Minutes –+
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
536 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the prox-
imity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Med High
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
10
MULTIMEDIA 537
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see ac-
tive guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the igni-
tion is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
538 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wip-
ers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
10
MULTIMEDIA 539
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay +–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the head-
lights will turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under
certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or un-
locked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
540 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked
or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature se-
lected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 541
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
•
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door unlocks on the first press of
the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
•
When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
•
If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
•
With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than
once only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
542 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
•
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver
mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
•
The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the
key fob is used to unlock the door.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay +–
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the igni-
tion is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay +–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 543
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
544 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Vol-
ume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 545
Phone/Bluetooth Settings
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
546 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
MULTIMEDIA 547
Reset Settings
After pressing the “Reset Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth de-
vices and presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version.
548 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
Media etc.)
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 549
CD Player — If Equipped
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track. If you push the switch up or down three
times, it will play the third, etc.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic,
iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone
devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully sup-
port the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website
for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2
550 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 551
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C
NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Uconnect 3.0
552 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 553
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the head-
liner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or Send/Receive
A Text
554 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3.0
10
MULTIMEDIA 555
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
556 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 3.0
10
MULTIMEDIA 557
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
558 MULTIMEDIA
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”;
“ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3.0
10
MULTIMEDIA 559
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
560 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3.0
10
MULTIMEDIA 561
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
562 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button
or Phone button (if enabled) and say
“ Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button
or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “ Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
10
MULTIMEDIA 563
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate (4C/4C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
564 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you do not know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
10
MULTIMEDIA 565
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
566 MULTIMEDIA
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
For further information:
• U.S. residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit: siriusxm.ca/guardian
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your car.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 567
To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUcon-
nect.com(U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
568 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 569
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
570 MULTIMEDIA
• Additional Apps
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android
5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks
of Google Inc.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 571
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
572 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents call:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents call:1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 573
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................576
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............576
▫ Prepare A List .........................576
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............576
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................576
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............577
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........577
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................577
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........577
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................578
▫ Service Contract .......................578
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............579
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................579
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............579
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .579
▫ In Canada ............................580
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............580
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
576 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 577
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
578 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 579
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
580 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............452
Adding Fuel ..............................341
Additives, Fuel ............................500
Adjust
Down ...............................46, 47
Forward .............................46, 47
Rearward ............................46, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Adjustable Pedals ...........................59
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ........................229
Air Bag Warning Light .....................226
Enhanced Accident Response .............235, 422
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................422
If Deployment Occurs .....................234
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................230
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............237
Maintenance ............................237
Transporting Pets ........................264
Air Bag Light.......................180, 226, 266
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......436
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................438
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................438, 439
Air Conditioner System ......................438
Air Conditioning............................96
Air Conditioning Filter ....................99, 439
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................98
Air Filter ................................436
Air Pressure
Tires..................................473
Alarm
Panic ..................................23
Security Alarm........................34, 181
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Android Auto .............................570
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................451, 506
Disposal ...............................454
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................194
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................186
Apple CarPlay ............................571
Ashtray .................................130
Assist,
Hill Start ...........................196
Audio Systems (Radio).......................513
Auto Down Power Windows ..................101
Automatic Door Locks........................40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............97
Automatic Transmission ..................283, 460
Adding Fluid ...........................460
Fluid And Filter Change ...................460
582 INDEX
Fluid Change ...........................460
Fluid Level Check .................457, 458, 459
Fluid Type ..........................457, 509
Special Additives .........................458
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ........288
AUXCord ...............................550
Auxiliary Driving Systems ....................206
Auxiliary Switches..........................131
Axle Fluid ............................461, 509
Axle Lubrication ...........................461
Battery...............................181, 433
Charging System Light ....................181
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................24
Battery Saver Feature.........................76
Belts, Seat ................................266
Body Builders Guide..........................5
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................445
B-Pillar Location ...........................468
Brake Assist System .........................196
Brake Control System........................195
Brake Fluid ...........................456, 509
Brake System ..........................456, 497
Fluid Check ............................456
Master Cylinder .........................456
Parking ...............................279
Warning Light ...........................180
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................283
Bulb Replacement ..........................376
Bulbs, Light ...........................268, 376
Camera .................................339
Camera, Rear .............................339
Camper .................................145
Capacities, Fluid ...........................506
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) .........................430, 435
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................453
Carbon Monoxide
Warning ................265, 502
Cargo Light ...............................75
Car Washes...............................488
Cellular Phone ............................551
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............380
Center Seat Storage Compartment ...............117
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................464
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .191
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............265
Checks, Safety.............................265
Child Restraint ............................238
12
INDEX 583
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................242
Child Seat Installation ..................254, 256
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........252
Infant And Child Restraints .................240
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............249
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......244
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........241
Seating Positions .........................243
Cigar Lighter .............................130
Clean Air Gasoline .........................500
Cleaning
Wheels ................................482
Climate Control ............................82
Automatic ..............................90
Manual ................................82
Cold Weather Operation......................278
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................573
Compact Spare Tire .........................480
Contract, Service ...........................578
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............453
Cooling System ............................450
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................452
Coolant Level ........................451, 454
Cooling Capacity .........................506
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................454
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................451
Inspection ..............................454
Points To Remember ......................455
Pressure Cap ............................453
Radiator Cap ...........................453
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......451, 506, 507
Corrosion Protection ........................487
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .................323
Cruise Light ...........................188, 189
Cupholders...............................125
Customer Assistance ........................576
Cybersecurity .............................514
Daytime Running
Lights ......................70
Dealer Service .............................433
Defroster, Rear Window ....................82, 90
Defroster, Windshield........................266
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................80
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................189
Differential, Limited Slip .....................321
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................419
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................454
Do Not Disturb ............................570
584 INDEX
Door Ajar ................................183
Door Ajar Light............................183
Door Locks
Automatic ..............................40
Doors....................................35
Drag And Drop Menu .......................513
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................42
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................366
E-85 Fuel ................................503
Electrical Power Outlets ......................126
Electric Brake Control System ..................195
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................194
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............199, 203
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .301, 306, 311, 317
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...............289, 297
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............199
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........182
Emergency Braking .........................279
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting ...........................410
Emission Control System Maintenance............191
Engine ..................................430
Air Cleaner .............................436
Block Heater ............................278
Break-In Recommendations .................278
Compartment ........................430, 431
Compartment Identification ..............430, 431
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................507
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................265, 502
Fails To Start ............................277
Flooded, Starting .........................277
Fuel Requirements ....................499, 506
Jump Starting ...........................410
Oil ............................434, 506, 507
Oil Filler Cap ........................430, 435
Oil Filter ...............................436
Oil Reset ..............................168
Oil Selection .........................434,
506
Oil Synthetic ............................435
Overheating ............................413
Starting ...............................273
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................434
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................434
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........235, 422
Entry System, Illuminated .....................79
Ethanol ..............................500, 503
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................265, 502
12
INDEX 585
Exhaust System ........................265, 449
Exterior Lights ..........................69, 268
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................436
Air Conditioning ......................99, 439
Engine Oil ..........................436, 507
Engine Oil Disposal .......................435
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................371
Turn Signals ......................74, 188, 268
Flash-To-Pass ..............................72
Flat Tire Stowage...........................406
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................505
Engine Oil .............................504
Fuel Requirements ........................503
Maintenance ............................505
Replacement Parts ........................505
Starting ...............................504
Fluid, Brake ..............................509
Fluid Capacities............................506
Fluid Leaks...............................268
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................456
Fluids And Lubricants .......................507
Fog Lights .............................74, 379
Fold Flat Load Floor ........................121
Fold-Flat Seats .............................42
Four Wheel Drive ..........................300
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................417
Front Axle (Differential) ......................461
Fuel ....................................499
Adding ...............................341
Additives ..............................500
Clean Air ..............................500
Ethanol ............................500, 503
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................343
Flexible ...............................503
Gasoline ...............................499
Light .................................186
Materials Added .........................500
Methanol ..............................500
Octane
Rating ........................499, 507
Requirements ........................499, 506
Tank Capacity ...........................506
Fuses ...................................382
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............107
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....................343
586 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................500
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................500
Gear Ranges ..............................291
Gear Selector Override.......................414
General Information.........................211
Glass Cleaning ............................493
Grocery Bag Retainer.........................54
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................345
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................345
Guide
Body Builders ............................5
GVWR ..................................343
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................366
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................371
Headlights ...............................377
Automatic ..............................72
Automatic High Beam ......................71
Cleaning ...............................488
High Beam ..............................71
Lights On Reminder .......................73
Passing ................................72
Switch .................................69
Head Restraints ............................55
Heated Mirrors .............................67
Heated Seats...............................51
Heated Steering Wheel .......................58
Heater, Engine Block ........................278
Hill Descent Control ........................204
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................204
Hill Start Assist ............................196
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................349
Hoisting .................................462
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............107
Hood Prop ...............................106
Hood Release .............................106
Ignition ..................................28
Switch .................................28
Illuminated Entry ...........................79
In Case Of Emergency .......................371
Inside Rearview Mirror .................61, 62,
371
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ............................188
Display ...............................166
Engine Oil Reset .........................168
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................492
12
INDEX 587
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................353
Interior Appearance Care .....................491
Interior Lights..............................76
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............80
Introduction ................................4
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ........................18
Inverter
Power ................................130
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................550
Jack Location .............................394
Jack Operation ............................394
Jump Starting .............................410
Key Fob
Panic Alarm .............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........27, 33
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....24
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......27
Key-In Reminder............................29
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................37, 273
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ...................522
Passive Entry ............................37
Passive Entry Programming ..................37
Keys ....................................20
Replacement .............................33
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................74
Lane Change Assist ..........................74
Latches..................................268
Hood .................................106
Lead Free Gasoline .........................499
Leaks, Fluid ..............................268
Life Of Tires ..............................476
Light Bulbs ...........................268, 376
Lights ................................79, 268
AirBag.........................180, 226, 266
Automatic Headlights ......................72
Automatic High Beam ......................71
Brake Assist Warning ......................202
Brake Warning ..........................180
Bulb Replacement ........................376
Cargo .................................75
Center Mounted Stop ......................380
Courtesy/Reading ......................77, 78
Cr
uise .............................188, 189
Daytime Running .........................70
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ......181
Exterior .............................69, 268
588 INDEX
Fog................................74, 379
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................371
Headlights ..............................69
High Beam ..............................71
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............204
Interior ...........................76, 77, 78
Lights On Reminder .......................73
Low Fuel ..............................186
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........183
Park ...............................73, 188
Passing ................................72
Seat Belt Reminder .......................179
Security Alarm ..........................181
Service ................................376
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............206
Traction Control .........................202
Turn Signals ................74, 188, 268, 377, 379
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .181, 188
Limited-Slip Differential ..................321, 461
Loading Vehicle............................343
Tires..................................468
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................177
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................177
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............177
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............177
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................40
Child Protection ..........................41
Power Door .............................37
Low Tire Pressure System.....................206
Lubrication, Body ..........................445
Lug Nuts ................................498
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................497
Maintenance ..............................105
Maintenance Free Battery .....................433
Maintenance Schedule .......................425
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .183, 191
Manual
Park Release ............................416
Service ................................580
Media Hub ...............................550
Memory
Seat ..............................48
Methanol ................................500
Mirrors ..................................61
Electric Powered ..........................64
Heated .................................67
Memory ................................48
Outside ................................63
Rearview .........................61, 62, 371
12
INDEX 589
Trailer Towing ...........................67
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................206
Mopar Parts ..............................579
MP3 Control ..............................550
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................69
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................278
Occupant Restraints.........................212
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................499
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ...............367
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ...............367
Oil, Engine............................434, 507
Capacity ...............................506
Change Interval .........................434
Dipstick ...............................432
Disposal ...............................435
Filter ..............................436, 507
Filter Disposal ...........................435
Identification Logo .......................434
Materials Added To .......................435
Pressure Warning Light ....................182
Recommendation .....................434, 506
Synthetic ..............................435
Viscosity ........................434, 435, 506
Oil Filter, Change ..........................436
Oil Filter, Selection..........................436
Oil Pressure Light ..........................182
Oil Reset.................................168
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................189
Operating Precautions .......................189
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................5,580
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................63
Overdrive ................................298
Overdrive OFF Switch .......................298
Overheating, Engine ........................413
Paint Car
e................................487
Panic Alarm ...............................23
Parking Brake .............................279
ParkSense System, Rear ...................326, 333
Passive Entry ..............................37
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................59
Personalized Main Menu .....................513
Pets ....................................264
Pickup Box............................132, 133
Pinch Protection ...........................105
590 INDEX
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........468
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................382
Door Locks ..............................37
Inverter ...............................130
Mirrors ................................64
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............126
Seats ..................................45
Sliding Rear Window ......................102
Steering ...............................322
Sunroof ...............................103
Windows ..............................100
Power Seats
Down ...............................46, 47
Forward .............................46, 47
Rearward ............................46, 47
Recline .................................46
Tilt.................................46, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Power Steering Fluid ........................509
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................223
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................223
Radial Ply Tires ............................474
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .........451, 453
Radio Frequency
General Information ................27, 32, 33, 40
Radio Operation ...........................551
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................81
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................461
Rear Camera ..............................339
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ..................143
Rear ParkSense System ...................326, 333
Reclining Rear Seats .........................45
Recreational Towing.........................360
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .........362
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......364
Reformulated Gasoline.......................500
Refrigerant ...............................439
Release, Hood .............................106
Reminder,
Seat Belt .........................213
Remote Keyless Entry ........................23
Panic Alarm .............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........27, 33
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................31
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .....524
Uconnect Settings ........................524
Replacement Bulbs .........................376
12
INDEX 591
Replacement Keys ...........................33
Replacement Tires ..........................477
Reporting Safety Defects .....................579
Restraints, Child ...........................238
Restraints, Head ............................55
Rotation, Tires.............................484
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................266
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................268
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................579
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................265
Safety Information, Tire ......................462
Safety Tips ...............................265
Schedule, Maintenance.......................425
Seat Belt Reminder .........................179
Seat Belts .............................213, 266
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................218
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........218
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......218
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........224
Child Restraints .........................238
Energy Management Feature ................223
Extender ...............................222
Front Seat ..........................213, 217
Inspection ..............................266
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................217
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............218
Operating Instructions .....................217
Pregnant Women .........................223
Pretensioners ...........................223
Reminder ..............................213
Seat Belt Extender ........................222
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................223
Untwisting Procedure .....................218
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................491
Seats.............................42, 44,
46, 47
Adjustment ........................42, 46, 47
Easy Entry ..............................50
Folding Floor ...........................121
Heated .................................51
Memory ................................48
Power .................................45
Rear Folding .............................42
Reclining Rear ...........................45
Tilting .................................42
Ventilated ...............................53
Security Alarm ..........................34, 181
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............507
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................33
592 INDEX
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................32
Sentry Key Replacement ......................33
Service Assistance ..........................576
Service Contract ...........................578
Service Manuals ...........................580
Shifting .................................281
Automatic Transmission ................283, 291
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral
(N)...................................362
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral
(N)...................................364
Shift Lever Override ........................414
Signals, Turn ........................74, 188, 268
Siri.....................................569
Sliding Rear Window, Power ..................102
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................483
Snow Plow ...............................359
Snow Tires ...............................479
Spare Tires.........................479, 480, 481
Spark Plugs ..............................507
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................325
Cancel ................................326
Resume ...............................326
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................323
Starting ..............................272, 273
Automatic Transmission ....................272
Button .................................28
Cold Weather ...........................278
Engine Fails To Start ......................277
Starting And Operating ......................273
Starting Procedures .........................273
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ...............272
Steering
Power ................................322
Tilt Column .............................57
Wheel, Heated .........................57, 58
Wheel, Tilt ..............................57
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................549
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .549
Storage ..................................1
15
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ..............117
Storage, Vehicle .........................98, 487
Storing Your Vehicle ........................487
Stuck, Freeing .............................417
Sun Roof .............................103, 105
Closing ................................104
Opening ...............................104
Venting ...............................105
Sunshade Operation.........................105
12
INDEX 593
Sway Control, Trailer ........................203
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................435
Tailgate .................................145
Telescoping Steering Column ...................57
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............97
Tilt
Down ...............................46, 47
Up .................................46, 47
Tilt Steering Column .........................57
Tip Start .................................273
Tire And Loading Information Placard............468
Tire Markings .............................463
Tires..........................268, 472, 479, 485
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................476
Air Pressure ............................472
Chains ................................483
Compact Spare ..........................480
General Information ...................472, 479
High Speed .............................474
Inflation Pressure ........................473
Life Of Tires ............................476
Load Capacity .......................468, 469
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........184, 206
Quality Grading .........................485
Radial ................................474
Replacement ............................477
Rotation ...............................484
Safety .............................462, 472
Sizes .................................464
Snow Tires .............................479
Spare Tires ..........................479, 481
Spinning ...............................475
Trailer Towing ...........................352
Tread Wear Indicators .....................475
Wheel Nut Torque ........................497
Tire Safety Information.......................462
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................350
Tonneau
Cover .........................148, 488
Tonneau Cover Cleaning .....................488
To Open Hood ............................106
Torque Converter Clutch .....................300
Torque Specifications ........................498
Towing ..................................344
Disabled Vehicle .........................419
Guide .................................349
Recreational ............................360
Weight ................................349
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................360
Traction .................................366
594 INDEX
Traction Control ...........................199
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................203
Trailer Towing.............................344
Cooling System Tips ......................359
Hitches ................................349
Minimum Requirements ....................351
Mirrors ................................67
Tips ..................................358
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................350
Wiring ................................357
Trailer Towing Guide ........................349
Trailer Weight .............................349
Transfer Case .............................461
Electronically Shifted ............301, 306, 311, 317
Fluid .................................509
Transmission..............................283
Automatic .......................283, 291, 457
Fluid .................................509
Maintenance ............................457
Shifting ...............................281
Transporting Pets ..........................264
Tread Wear Indicators .......................475
Turn Signals .....................74, 188, 377, 379
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .....................515, 524
Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display ................516
Uconnect 4 With 8.4-Inch Display ...............533
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .......37, 515, 524
Passive Entry Programming ..............37, 522
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................485
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........107
Universal Transmitter........................107
Unleaded Gasoline .........................499
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................218
USB....................................550
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area..................143
Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) .............497
Vehicle Loading ........................343, 469
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage..........................98, 487
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ...........................18
Navigation ..............................18
Operating Instructions ......................18
Searching User Guide ......................18
Ventilated Seats.............................53
12
INDEX 595
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................434
Voice Command ...........................552
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................552
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .184
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warranty Information .......................579
Washers, Windshield......................80, 432
Washing Vehicle ...........................488
Water
Driving Through .........................366
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................482
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................482
Wind Buffeting .........................103, 105
Window Fogging ...........................99
Windows ................................100
Power ................................100
Reset Auto-Up ..........................102
Windshield Defroster ........................266
Windshield Washers ...................79, 80, 432
Fluid ...............................79, 432
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................446
Windshield Wipers ..........................79
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................446
Wipers, Intermittent .........................80
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ........................81
596 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Third Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
19DS-126-AC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
RAM 1500
RAM 1500
2019
